Grand
Cherokee SRT8
2 0 1 0
OWNE R ’ S MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ⅵ Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine MOPAR parts, and cares about
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all your satisfaction.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
ROLLOVER WARNING
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
1
injury. Drive carefully.
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equip-
ment.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Ⅵ Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Ⅵ Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Remote Open Window Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Ⅵ Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 37
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 41
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 22
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 24
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 43
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 44 Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 70
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) —
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 51
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the detented ON position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
4 — START
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove
box. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the theft alarm armed, will results in the alarm sounding.
Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead)
into the WIN to disarm theft alarm.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Removing Key Fob From Ignition
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Equipped/Personal
Settings
(Customer-
•
If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped tempo-
rarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
2
when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
position.
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
SENTRY KEYா
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
problems and loss of security protection.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it the authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
General Information
park lamps and/or turn signals will flash for an addi-
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 tional 15 minutes.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ-
2
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for unautho-
rized operation. When the alarm is activated, the Vehicle
Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals.
The horn will sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the
disturbance is still present (driver’s door, passenger door,
other doors, ignition) after three minutes, the headlights,
To Set the Alarm
The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or
when you use the power door lock switch while the door
is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster) transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
arming period, opening any door or the liftgate will button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm success- Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
fully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
To Disarm the System
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or
turn the ignition key to the ON position. If something has
triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door or
use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to un-
lock any door. They will remain on for approximately
30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off.
The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
2
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob with Three-Button RKE Transmitter
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash To Lock the Doors
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
WARNING!
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
2
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
Remote Open Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass
Press the FLIPPER GLASS/LIFTGATE RELEASE button
two times (the second press within five seconds of the
first press) to open liftgate flipper glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using the Panic Alarm
Transmitter Battery Replacement
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one battery.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lamps will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
NOTE:
•
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the Key Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the
slot and gently pry open the access door.
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
and horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
2
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Battery Replacement
1— Battery Access Door
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected How to Use Remote Start
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Shift lever in PARK
Doors closed
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE PANIC button not pressed
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
WARNING!
•
•
•
If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
•
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
(Continued)
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in-
juries and death.
2
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
until you pull up the lock plungers.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the Child Protection Door Lock
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic Protection Door Locks. If you push up on the lever on the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding of the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Child Protection Door Locks.
Automatic Door Locks
WARNING!
If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph
(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever
a door is opened.
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Protection Door
Locks are engaged.
This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACCESSORY position.
2
Child Protection Door Lock
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Window Switches
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Both the driver and front passenger window switches Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
the first detent and release when you want the window to
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” move-
stop.
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for 10 min- tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
utes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
either front door will cancel this feature.
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver and Front Passenger Door Only
WARNING!
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Resetting the Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
2
Pull the window switch up and close the window com-
pletely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button again.
Window Lockout Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.
Liftgate Release
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
•
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
2
The tailpipes may be hot and you could be seri-
ously injured if you come into contact with them.
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
Liftgate Glass Release
WARNING!
To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connec- OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing Some of the most important safety features in your
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass vehicle are the restraint systems:
is open.
•
•
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
— if equipped
WARNING!
•
•
Supplemental Side Seat Airbags — if equipped
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
2
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
WARNING!
•
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a colli-
sion, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
2
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Latch Plate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate to Buckle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
2
WARNING!
•
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your ab-
domen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and
have it fixed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack from Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
from your neck. Press the release button to release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position it is locked in position.
2
that serves you best.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position.
Children 12 years old and younger should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat.
WARNING!
•
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the
buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi-
tive (emergency) locking mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be (BeltAlertா)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert will con-
tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision deploys the
airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
pretensioner must be replaced immediately.
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (do not
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
Seat Belt Extender
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure. dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
tender and store it.
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) —
Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airbag Warning Light
Driver Front Airbag
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
Front Passenger Airbag
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
Knee Impact Bolster
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— if equipped
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Advanced Front Airbag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car.
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
2
•
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
•
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
WARNING!
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
pant protection.
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
their arm.
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
buckled up in a rear seat.
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
WARNING!
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Airbags need
room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel.
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
2
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ЉIf You Need
AssistanceЉ.
•
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air- The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners — airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type of collision.
of impact.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi- time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and deployed.
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
collisions.
away from an inflating airbag.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
on and will not inflate.
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
2
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
rates are possible, based on the collision type and sever-
ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
front passenger.
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on severity and airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events. Ad-
ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag
deployment and provide verification.
If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
2
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
event the ORC will determine whether to have the or all of the following may occur:
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
ing functions:
•
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact your authorized dealer.
2
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
You will want to have the airbags ready to proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
inflate for your protection in a collision. While fuse is good.
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
switch is first turned ON.
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
•
•
The light remains on after the approximate six to
eight-second interval.
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine NOTE:
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label deployment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
2
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before Group LLC product.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
•
•
•
•
•
Vehicle speed
Engine RPM
Brake switch status
Pedal position
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
And other parameters depending on vehicle seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
configuration
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an-
chorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat An-
chorage System.)
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
2
Infants and Child Restraints
WARNING!
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used
in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen-
ger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or
death to infants in this position.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
•
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates. The second row center position has an auto-
matic locking retractor. Both types of seat belts are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary). For the second row center seat belt
with the automatic locking retractor, pull the belt from
the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. For
additional information, refer to ЉAutomatic Locking
ModeЉ.
•
If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
2
•
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt Canadian residents, should refer to Transport
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into Canada’s website for additional information.
the buckle with the release button facing out.
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System.)
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint in any vehicle.
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
2
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played
with, and never leave your child unattended in the
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- vehicle.
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower at-
tachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regard-
less of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH- run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using seat cushion surfaces.
the vehicle’s seat belts. For typical installation instruc-
tions, refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System”.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
2
First, loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the
lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage
bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, locate
the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you
are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap
to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the
belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belts
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight;
however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
2
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle
whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer
are required for proper installation of a child re-
straining device. In the event of an accident, or under
severe vehicle maneuvers, leaving the subwoofer
unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or
fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle.
Tether Strap Mounting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
2
SAFETY TIPS
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
out of the area.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Airbag Warning Light
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
2
Lights
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
rized dealer.
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Defroster
Door Latches
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your Fluid Leaks
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
inoperable.
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Ⅵ Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Ⅵ Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . . 85
▫ Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Power Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 83
▫ Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 101
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . 101
▫ Smartbeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 103
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Ⅵ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
▫ Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Ⅵ Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 116
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ⅵ Parksense Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 119
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 112
Ⅵ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Parksense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Parksense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Enable/Disable Parksense . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Service Parksense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cleaning Parksense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ⅵ Parkview Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Turning Parkview On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Turning Parkview On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Ⅵ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Ⅵ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Ⅵ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Outside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward and
normal.
WARNING!
3
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger-side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other objects. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger-side mirror.
The driver and passenger outside mirrors will automati-
cally adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button
at the base of the inside mirror. The mirrors will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outside Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the off
(center) position to guard against accidentally moving a
mirror position.
Power Mirror Switch
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the sun visors.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ Phone
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
3
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Lighted Vanity Mirror
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat Adjustment — Recline
WARNING! (Continued)
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
•
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Using body pressure, move forward and rear-
ward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat
belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted, and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment
Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat
The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
on the right side of the driver’s seatback (all models) and outboard side of the driver’s seat. The bottom switch
on the left side of the passenger’s seatback (if equipped). controls up/down, forward/rearward and tilt adjust-
Moving the lumbar control lever forward and rearward ment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust-
will increase or decrease the lumbar support.
ment.
3
Manual Lumbar Control
Power Seat Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the passenger’s seat. The bottom
switch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The top
switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/down
adjustment.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear. The head restraints have a locking button which
must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all
positions. The restraints may be raised without pushing
in the button.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to Low-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting
will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min-
utes.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the heater/air
conditioning controls). The heaters provide the same
average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
WARNING!
•
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these Off.
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
When the High-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal High-level. If the High-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to Low-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The Low-level setting
Rear Heated Seat Switches
will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min-
utes.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
WARNING!
•
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
3
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)
to release.
Rear Seat Folded
To Raise Rear Seat
Rear Seat Release
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interfer-
ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: Do not fold the rear seat down with the center
seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Storage (Rear Seat Armrest) — If Equipped
The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage
armrest.
WARNING!
•
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
3
Rear Seat Armrest
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the pedals and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
storage bin.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed.
Armrest Storage Latch
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Driver Memory Switches
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s sideview
or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory mirror to the desired positions.
position. The memory system can accommodate up to
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
positions.
two memory positions.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
3
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
remove the key.
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
driver’s door.
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Step 3.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
the ON position.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
11. Select ЉRemote Linked to MemoryЉ in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ЉYesЉ. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory one second will occur before another recall can be
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not selected.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The Easy Entry/Exit Seat
system will recall any memory settings stored in position This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
before continuing to Step 3.
vehicle.
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
on the driver’s door.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
available:
3
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 on the driver’s door.
•
The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
•
The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driving position when the key is placed into the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward Two latches must be released to open the hood.
the ACC/ON position.
1. Pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis- the instrument panel and in front of the driver’s door.
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Hood Release Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation. Turn to the third detent for Auto-
matic Headlight operation (if equipped).
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instru-
ment panel light dimming, passing light, interior courtesy/
dome lights and optional fog lights. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel.
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system performs two functions. With the engine
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi-
(AUTO) to activate the Automatic Headlight system.
tion, the headlights will turn on and off based on the
surrounding light levels.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
3
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati-
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
Multifunction Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely To Activate
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
section for further information.
1. Select “Auto High Beams.” Refer to “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically ment Panel” for further information.
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in
2. Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
this section for further information.
headlight position.
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle spe- at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Deactivate
1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually
deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is
replaced, the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized 2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
dealer.
reactivate the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause Only
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
system to function improperly.
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
3
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Instrument Panel Dimmer
The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme
level whenever the engine is running, and the transmis- bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
sion is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC or door is opened.
the parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
be used for normal nighttime driving.
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last Battery Saver Feature
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light
position, parking light position, or the headlight position
when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position,
the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the
exterior and interior lights after eight minutes. Normal
operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or
when the headlight switch is turned to another position.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
switch has been turned to LOCK/ACC, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Fog Lights — If Equipped
NOTE:
The fog light switch is located in the multifunction
lever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/
turn lights, low beam headlights or the Automatic
Headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction
lever. A light in the instrument cluster shows when the
fog lights are on.
•
Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog
lights.
•
A front fog light is a lighting device that provides
illumination in front of the vehicle under conditions of
fog, rain, snow, or dust. The front fog lights supple-
ment the low beams of a standard headlight system.
3
•
Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights
should be made to prevent excessive glare for other
drivers.
Front Fog Light Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show defective.
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the
multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will
turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
Turn Signal Control
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Headlight Time Delay
Interior Lights
This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30, 60 or The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights (below the
90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. To instrument panel), an overhead console light (which
activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must contains both driver and passenger reading lights), read-
be rotated to the “Off” position after the ignition switch ing lights (located above the rear doors), and a rear cargo
is turned to LOCK/ACC. Only the headlights will illu- light. Opening a door, pressing the UNLOCK button on
minate during this time. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or turning
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable the center of the multifunction lever to the extreme up
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for position, will activate all interior courtesy lights.
further information.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each
light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the
lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the
lens a second time. There are also reading lights located
above the rear doors. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn these
lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second
time.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are low-speed wiper operation.
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to
high-speed wiper operation.
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features
of Your Vehicle”.
3
Front Wiper Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end of
the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired
delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maxi-
mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a
cycle every 1/2 second.
Front Wiper Control
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Windshield Washer Operation
Mist
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
delay range, the wiper will operate for several wipe release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
3
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
Mist Control
windshield washer use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
•
•
•
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
to activate this feature.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the OFF position when not using the system.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
NOTE:
•
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
•
Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
3
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as de-
sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be
adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in
actuating the pedals.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals
forward (away from the driver).
Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
•
•
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
CAUTION!
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control is
on. A message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked
out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Set” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Shifter In Re-
verse”). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal’s
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
3
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
(40 km/h).
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed
memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control System on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3
To Vary the Speed Setting
To Set a Desired Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped
the vehicle speed increases, so that tapping the lever
three times will increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h).
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the lever toward
you, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System maintains
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the moderate hills is normal.
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
Control.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
vehicle speed decreases.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
PARKSENSEா REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
ParkSenseா Sensors
EQUIPPED
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia,
ParkSense provides visible and audible indications of monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the
the distance between the rear fascia and the detected sensors’ field of view.
obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning Section
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12
and Note Section for limitations of this system and
to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in the
recommendations.
3
horizontal direction, depending on the location and
ParkSense will remember the last system state (enabled orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.
or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON position.
ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSenseா Warning Display
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, the
The ParkSense warning display, located in the headliner warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about
near the flipper glass, provides both visible and audible one second. Each side of the warning display has six
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia yellow and two red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the
and the detected obstacle.
obstacle when the red LED is ON.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
ParkSense Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
LED COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
59 in (150 cm)
51 in (130 cm)
45 in (115 cm)
39 in (100 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
28 in (70 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
12 in (30 cm)
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
8th LED
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Yes, Half Second
None
3
None
None
None
None
31.5 in (80 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
16 in (40 cm)
6 in (15 cm)
Yes, Intermittent
Yes, Continuous
Red
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Press the switch once to turn ParkSense on,
push the switch a second time to turn Park-
Sense off.
Enable/Disable ParkSenseா
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located on the upper switch bank of the instrument
panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the information. If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” ap-
instrument cluster will display the “PARK ASSIST DIS- pears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia/
ABLED” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- bumper is clean and free of snow, ice, mud, or other
tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument debris, see your authorized dealer.
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
Cleaning ParkSenseா
changed to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
ignition cycle, and it will display the message.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when the system age the sensors.
is disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will
be OFF when the system is enabled.
System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Service ParkSenseா
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep ParkSense operating properly.
When ParkSense is defective, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
•
•
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
•
•
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. ParkSense might not detect an obstacle
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
3
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
•
•
ParkSense, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
If a ParkSense system malfunction occurs, a single
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM”. If this
occurs making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free
from snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
•
•
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
PARKVIEWா REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the ParkSense sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever
is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen. The Park-
View camera is located on the rear liftgate.
3
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning ParkViewா On or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
CAUTION!
•
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
Љcheck entire surroundingsЉ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Turning ParkViewா On or Off — Without
(HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may also be
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
included, if equipped.
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears
again.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
to turn the lights off.
battery.
The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead
opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK console and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is nating the different HomeLink channels.
pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de-
sign. Push the finger depression on the overhead console
to open. Push the finger depression to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
HomeLink Buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
3
Programming HomeLinkா
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being copied to
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans-
mitter buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: After training a HomeLink channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
3
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
activates, programming is complete.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
If the device does not activate, press the button a third door or gate motor.
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
If you have any problems or require assistance, please opener or
a
gate operator, replace “Programming
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button,
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
“CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
transmission – which may not be long enough for at this time.
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Then proceed with Step
HomeLink” earlier in this section.
4
under “Programming 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLinkா
Security
To operate, press and release the programmed It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the in your vehicle.
3
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
used at any time.
vidual channels cannot be erased.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkா Button
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for are some of the most common solutions:
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
complete the training for rolling code.
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Did you unplug the device for training and remember
to plug it back in?
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
3
•
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Pinch Protect Override
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any to move toward the closed position.
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
Closing Sunroof — Express
pressed.
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition OFF Operation
open.
The power sunroof switches remain active for up ap-
proximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
3
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Sunroof Fully Closed
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- sunroof is fully closed.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
•
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and
element must be used.
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Front Power Outlets
The front power outlets are located to the left and right of
the convenience tray (lower center of instrument panel).
Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access these
power outlets.
The power outlet located on the left side of the tray can
be used to power a conventional cigar lighter.
The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left
rear cargo area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
•
•
3
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Rear Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION! (Continued)
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
3
Power Inverter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the power inverter switch (located on the upper NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,
switch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the there will be a delay of approximately one second before
switch again to turn the power off.
the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indica-
tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
3
Rear Cupholders
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light
Front Cupholders
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multifunction lever to the extreme top position. If all
doors are closed and only the liftgate is open, pushing on
The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that
pull out from the lower center of the rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the cargo light lens surface will turn off all interior lights. Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
Push on the lens surface a second time to restore the
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
interior lights to normal operation.
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
Rear Storage Compartment
The rear storage compartment is located on the driver’s
side behind the second row seat.
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Storage Compartment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
In an accident, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
3
Rear Cargo Cover
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
•
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Cargo Load Floor
WARNING! (Continued)
The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic
lined tray which holds a variety of items.
•
•
•
Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
3
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Cargo Load Floor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In REAR WINDOW FEATURES
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
procedure:
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The cargo load floor latches should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.
1. Flip up the pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular
(straight up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Lift the tray over the loop(s), and reposition the tray.
4. Pull up on the loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
perpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.
5. Push the loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to the
top of the tray.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Rotate the switch upward to the “On” position to If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rear
activate the rear wiper.
window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the
rear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed,
the rear wiper switch, or the ignition switch, needs to be
turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rotate the switch upward to the “washer” position
to activate that rear washer. The washer pump will
continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is
engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
3
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park” defroster automatically turns off after approximately
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces- 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this press the button a second time.
happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current position
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
and will not go to “park”.
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4
Ⅵ Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 166
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Ⅵ Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 198
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . 185
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 209
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 209
Ⅵ Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 189
Ⅵ Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 189
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Connecting The iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 197
▫ Controlling The iPod Using Radio
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ⅵ Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Ⅵ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Ⅵ Kicker High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
Equipped (REN/RER/RBZ/RES Radios Only). . 215
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Ⅵ Remote Sound System Controls —
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 216
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Ⅵ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Ⅵ Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet
5 — Upper Switch Bank
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Climate Controls
11 — Ignition Switch
12 — Storage Bin
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Radio
6 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
7 — Storage Bin
4 — Glove Compartment
8 — Power Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
2. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
sary.
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
4
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
CAUTION!
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
6. Airbag Warning Light
required. However, the conventional brake system will
This light turns on and remains on for six to continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is not on.
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not turn
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
further information.
4
8. Tachometer
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
(RPM).
The light will turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as 9. Vehicle Security Light
four seconds.
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or turns on while
driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Oil Pressure Warning Light
12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect approximately one minute and then remain continuously
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for to continue to function properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
240°F (116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range 200–230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer
remains on the 240°F (116°C) or greater, and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately,
and call an authorized dealership for service.
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
15. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light — If
Equipped
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
4
14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in acci-
dent.
17. Cruise Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the speed con-
trol system is turned ON.
18. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
must be reset at zero.
the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see your
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate
service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
19. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
4
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
PARK.
when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
20. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
22. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected the light will come on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. Charging System Light
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
This light shows the status of the electrical charging (EVIC)
system. The light should come on when the ignition The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn instrument cluster.
off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system
light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing
a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE
IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
24. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.3 U.S.
Gallons (8.7 Liters) this light will come on and
remain on until fuel is added. The Low Fuel
Warning Light may turn on and off again, especially
during and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns.
This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
The EVIC consists of the following:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Status
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
Compass Display
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Personal Settings, and System Sta-
tus.
4
Outside Temperature Display
Trip Computer Functions
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select
the displayed function (YES (Y) or NO (N).
Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-
Selectable Surround [DSS])
•
Performance Pages (if equipped)
SCROLL Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features), and System Status
Messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE Button
•
•
KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PRO-
GRAM LIMIT
Press
and
release
the
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.
PROGRAMMING ACTIVE
GRAMMED
—
NEW KEY PRO-
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SERVICE SECURITY KEY
DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
X DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
•
•
•
TURN SIGNAL ON
PERFORM SERVICE
LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)
DAMAGED KEY — KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI-
CATE
LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)
•
•
KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — KEY NOT PRO-
GRAMMED
HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
WRONG KEY — KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO
VEHICLE
HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)
WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)
COOLANT LOW (with graphic)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON
AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF
PARK ASSIST DISABLED
SERVICE SUSPENSION
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
WARNING! LIMIT SPEED
CHECK GASCAP
4
ESP OFF
IOD FUSE OUT
UPSHIFT (with graphic)
MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET
MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET
CHECK GAUGES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — SEATBELT BUCK-
LED (with graphic)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
Only)
MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK
RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-
tem Only)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DRIVER 1 MEMORY
Stereo (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound [DSS])
DRIVER 2 MEMORY
Video Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — CRUISE CONTROL SET
ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED — SHIFTER IN REVERSE
TIRE LOW PRESSURE
Audio Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
CHECK TPM SYSTEM
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-
tem Only)
Braking Distance (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
•
RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM Sys-
tem Only)
1/8 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
•
•
1/4 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Trip A
Trip B
Instantaneous G-Force (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
Elapsed Time
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Peak G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)
RKE BATTERY LOW
Service Distance
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Temperature
Display Units of Measure In
VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
IGNITION POSITION
4
PRESS BRAKE TO START
INSERT KEY
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
TURN TO ON
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
•
Distance To Empty
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
•
Trip B
SELECT button.
reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
•
Elapsed Time
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a ЉLOW FUELЉ message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant Shows the current engine oil pressure. The scale will read
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ЉLOW from 0–100 psi (0–689 kPa).
FUELЉ message and a new DTE value will display.
•
Engine Oil Pressure
•
Engine Oil Temperature
Shows the current engine oil temperature. The scale will
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last read from 140° – 300°F (60° – 149°C).
reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
•
Display Units of Measure In
Performance Pages — If Equipped
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and hold
the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds. Current
display will reset along with other functions.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Pages include the following features:
The following describes each feature and its operation:
•
•
•
•
•
•
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
Braking Distance
1/8 Mile
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
1/4 Mile
•
The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
Instantaneous G-Force
Peak G-Force
•
•
•
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
To access, press and release the MENU button until
Performance Pages displays in the EVIC. Press the
SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.
The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION
SELECT button is pressed.
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run time and display the vehicle’s best
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
•
To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
•
•
The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
pressed.
•
•
The distance and speed measurements will continue to
display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is
pressed.
4
•
This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and prepare the cluster to record a new
run.
•
•
Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
The word “READY” will flash when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
•
To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/
4 mile).
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
•
The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph (longitudinal and lateral) along with a friction circle that
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condi- displays the directions of the forces.
tions are met for the event to begin.
Peak G-Force
•
•
•
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach When selected, this screen displays all four G-force
1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
values (two longitudinal and two lateral).
The time and speed will continue to display until the
FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
•
•
When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) run.
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
peak force values.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Compass Display
in an area, free from magnetic material until the CAL
The compass readings indicate the direction indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The Compass
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the will now function normally.
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to dis-
play one of eight compass readings and the
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
outside temperature.
Manual Compass Calibration
COMPASS
Button
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
4
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
Automatic Compass Calibration
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is
calibrated. To complete the calibration process, drive
slowly (5 mph/ 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be dis-
played in the EVIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and Geo-
graphic North is great enough to cause the compass to
give false readings. For the most accurate compass per-
formance, the compass variance must be set using the
following procedure:
Compass Variance Map
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the Overhead console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” is
displayed in the EVIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
change the variance number. Continue until desired Features)
number is reached.
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
5. Press either MENU, SCROLL, or COMPASS/TEMP
button to set the value and exit.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
4
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround choices:
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-
Language
mation on the current surround mode.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
•
•
Stereo
Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC- select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you con-
TION SELECT button to change surround modes.
tinue, the information will display in the selected lan-
guage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lan- Remote Key Unlock
guage selection. Please refer to “Language Selection” in When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
Uconnect™ Phone for details.
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When
“Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, you must press the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When “All Doors 1st Press” is se-
lected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press”
Auto Door Locks
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will lock
automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or
NO (N) appears.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will unlock appears.
when the vehicle is stopped, and the transmission is in
Sound Horn with Lock
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
appears.
When YES (Y) is selected, a short horn sound will occur
when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y)
or NO (N) appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Flash Lamps with Lock
SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to
When YES (Y) is selected, the front and rear turn signals “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understand-
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or information.
without the “Sound Horn with Lock” feature. To make
Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
Automatic Headlamps Only)
LECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in
4
Headlamp Off Delay
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,” selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
Auto High Beams (Available with SmartBeam™
Only)
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To Features Of Your Vehicle”.
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
When YES (Y) is selected, the system will automatically Interval was Changed)
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on When this feature is selected, the current accumulated
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) interval. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but-
appears. When NO (N) is selected, the system reverts to ton until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Service Interval
Only)
When this feature is selected, a service interval between This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
500 miles (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
the STEP button when in this display will select distances FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles appears.
(10 000 km) in 500 miles (800 km) increments.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Key Off Power Delay
Display Units of Measure In:
When this feature is selected, the power window The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), DVD can be changed between English and Metric units of
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), measure. To make your selection, press and release the
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “MET-
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle RIC” appears.
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
System Status
4
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
•
•
System OK
System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pres- NOTE:
sure of all four road tires). For additional information,
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
And Operating”.
•
Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pres-
sures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
•
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Tire Pressure Display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
4
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
Equipped screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User downward is displayed.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing Daylight Savings Time
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
current setting:
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Changing the Time Zone
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in 1. Turn on the radio.
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
1. Turn on the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. 4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
Uconnect gps — RER Only
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to ward is displayed.
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
4
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
1. Turn on the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in Changing the Time Zone
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
1. Turn on the radio.
played to change the current setting.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
as follows to change the current setting:
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch knob to save time change.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass RW/FF
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
4
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. MP3 Audio Play
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
NOTE:
•
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
DISC Button
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
CAUTION!
4
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
•
•
•
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
CD and MP3 modes.
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Play.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
character extension)
4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
character extension)
•
•
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
display the file name and folder name, and will assign multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, longer disc loading times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
MPEG
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
Specification
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
Playback of MP3 Files
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
time to start playing the MP3 files.
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
SEEK Buttons
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
stations without stopping until you release it.
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
4
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
TUNE Control
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
4
treble tones.
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
16-Digit Character
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No program type or un-
defined
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
None
Adult Hits
Classical
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16-Digit Character
16-Digit Character
Display
Program Type
Program Type
Display
Classic Rock
College
Country
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
Talk
Top 40
Weather
News
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
4
to save time change.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 - 6
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
stations).
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
CAUTION!
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
CAUTION! (Continued)
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
•
•
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
4
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
change of pace.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
•
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to longer disc loading times.
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.)
4
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: not play the file.
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
character extension)
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. VBR bit rates.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
MPEG
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Specification
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
playable files).
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
4
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed
timeЉ priority mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
RER, RBZ, REN, REP, REW, RB2 or REZ touch-screen
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The radio UCI feature, refer to the separate RER, REN, RBZ,
time of day will display for five seconds (when the RB2 or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is available only if
ignition is OFF).
equipped as an option with these radios.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User the provided interface cable.
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)” in the website for software updates.
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
•
Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
•
If the iPod battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Connecting The iPodா
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to Using This Feature
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in By using the provided connection cable to connect an
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the iPod to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPod may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
4
•
The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
•
The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
NOTE:
•
You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
ing the cable.
The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod device)
Controlling The iPodா Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod) mode and access a connected
iPod, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once in the UCI (iPod) mode, iPod audio tracks (if
available from iPod) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod and display data:
•
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
•
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
•
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod.
4
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod.
Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
Preset 2 – Artists
Preset 3 – Albums
Preset 4 – Genres
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
Preset 6 – Podcasts
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod.
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RBZ/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
CAUTION!
•
•
Leaving the iPod (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
Placing items on the iPod, or connections to the
iPod in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
4
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
WARNING!
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
the radio to exit this screen.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Please have the following information available when faceplate.
calling:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Number (ESN/SID).
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
Satellite Antenna
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Reception Quality
position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
4
structure or under a physical obstacle.
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
cause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
additional three seconds will make the radio display the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return lected.
to normal display).
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF
type.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
4
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
Equipped)
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
KICKERா HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) – Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
IF EQUIPPED
front seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode is
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio described under “KICKER Mobile Surround (KMS1).”
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of
any stereo audio source. Anew feature of the KICKER the original recording. Some audio will sound better in
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
for any audio source or video source.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
“Video Surround” is optimized for rear-seat passengers matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-
watching a video, and “Audio Surround” is optimized round audio if desired.
for front-seat passengers for any audio source. This
The removable subwoofer is located in the rear cargo
surround effect is available for audio from any source –
area, and is fastened in place using the child restraint
AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or Video / Video / AUX –
anchors, located on the left rear passenger seatback.
and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Installing The Subwoofer
2. Align the left outside edge of the subwoofer with the
outside edge of the inner cargo tie down hook.
1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so Removing The Subwoofer
that the rear edge lines up with the end of the load floor.
1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.
4. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the subwoofer.
5. Fold the left rear passenger seat rearward into the
upright position. The rear tether anchors should engage
the hooks located on the back of the subwoofer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
access the switches.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, etc.).
4
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
Wheel)
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- CLIMATE CONTROLS
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
Automatic Temperature Control
The Automatic Temperature Control System automati-
cally maintains the interior comfort level desired by the
driver and passenger.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
4
Automatic Temperature Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO, allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
and not the actual air temperature.
the OFF (O) position on the blower control knob stops the
system completely.
Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, and
then turn the blower control (on the left) knob to either NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should time without affecting automatic control operation. How-
be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO ever, if the driver and/or passenger temperature knobs
position should be used when more airflow is desired, or are set to the full hot or full cold positions, the air
when rear seat occupants are present. Dial in the comfort temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold
setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating respectively. With the temperature setting in these posi-
the driver’s or passenger’s control knob. Once the com- tions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort
fort level is selected, the system will maintain that level control.
automatically using the heating system. Should the de-
The air conditioning in this system is au-
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
tomatic. Pressing this button while in
will automatically make the adjustment.
Air
AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash
three times and remain off. This indicates
Conditioning
that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air
conditioning is not necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
The system will automatically control re-
circulation. However, pressing this but-
ton will temporarily put the system in
“Recirculation” mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke,
•
•
Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned
off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a
noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of
normal operation.
Recirculation
Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pressing the “Recirculation” button. How-
ever, under certain conditions in automatic the system
is blowing air out of the defrost vents. When these
conditions are present, and the “Recirculation” button
is pressed, the indicator will flash and remain off. This
tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation
mode at this time. If you would like to go to Recircu-
lation mode, you must first move your mode knob to
Panel, Panel/Floor, or Floor, then press the “Recircu-
lation” button. This feature will reduce the possibility
of window fogging.
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. This will cause
the LED to illuminate.
4
NOTE:
•
The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the climate control sensor’s location.
Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation
of this system.
•
To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto-
matic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
remain off until the engine warms up. However, the
fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is
selected or if you manually select a blower speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation
NOTE:
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature
Control, and Manual. This means the customer can
override the blower, mode, and disable the Automatic
Temperature Control completely.
•
For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate
controls will not function during Remote Start opera-
tion if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
•
Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Op-
eration Chart below for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a NOTE: The defrost mode is not automatically selected.
temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full It must be manually selected, when desired.
counterclockwise position, the system will deliver full
hot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
Defrost/Floor
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
knob to one of the following positions. When the Mode is side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered
set to any position other than AUTO, the automatic to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
control of air temperature is disabled. The user must maintained.
adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem-
perature.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also delivered to defrost while in floor mode, so that comfort
directed to the front door windows through the side can be maintained.
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Bi-Level
outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button
Air flows both through the outlets located in the includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air is selected.
flows through the registers in the back of the center
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning, the
console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while Recirculation
the floor outlets deliver heated air.
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The “Recirculation” mode should
only be used temporarily. The button includes
an LED that illuminates, which indicates that the “Recir-
culation” mode is active. You may use this feature
separately.
4
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
Air Conditioning
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the “Recirculate” button to return to outside
air. Some temperature/humidity conditions will cause
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
and off during manual operation only. Condi-
tioned outside air is then directed through the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
captured interior air to condense on windows and ham- blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
per visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
“Recirculation” mode to be selected while in the defrost defrost mode.
or defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculation
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
blink and then turn off.
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside Summer Operation
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, quality antifreeze coolant, during the summer, to provide
turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
comfort.
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa- Vacation Storage
tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
shift into NEUTRAL (N) and press the accelerator air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
and fan speed.
pressor damage when the system is started again.
4
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Five–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 242
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below Ϫ20°F Or Ϫ29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Ⅵ AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Ⅵ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 241 Ⅵ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 268
Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Ⅵ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 275
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Ⅵ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 279
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Ⅵ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 284
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
5
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Ⅵ Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Normal Starting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
Tip Start
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
belts.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
•
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the ignition switch. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle.
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Extreme Cold Weather (Below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What to Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
5
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
CAUTION!
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
•
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
WARNING!
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to either the
ON or START position (engine running or not) and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
the ignition switch in the ON position and the brake
pedal pressed. To operate the shift lock manual override,
perform the following steps:
5
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition
switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the 6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
shift lock manual override cover which is located on the
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
PRNDL bezel.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Interlock Manual Override
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition switch is not turned to
the LOCK position first.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
5
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position before restarting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
WARNING!
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should apply
the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
Once the key fob is removed from the ignition
switch, the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children unat-
tended inside a vehicle.
DRIVE
This range should only be selected when the vehicle is at
a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The
transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear.
The DRIVE position provides optimum driving charac-
teristics under all normal operating conditions. For addi-
tional shifting information, refer to “AutoStick” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
Rocking the Vehicle
REVERSE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and
Traction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF
before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Racing the engine or
spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing
the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
AUTOSTICKா
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver
with more control. AutoStick allows the driver to in-
crease engine braking ability, control upshift and down-
shift points, and enhance the driving experience. This
system can also provide the driver with more control
during passing, city driving, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
display a boxed Љ2Љ in the cluster.Љ Once AutoStick mode
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, the shift is engaged, a move to the right (+) or left (-) will trigger
lever can be moved from side to side. This allows the a upshift (+) or trigger a downshift (-).
driver to engage the AutoStick mode. Moving the shift
NOTE: In the AutoStick mode, the transmission will
lever to the right (+) or the left (-) will engage the
shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is manu-
AutoStick mode. In normal driving mode (Boxed “D”
ally selected by the driver.
displayed in the PRNDL), moving the shift lever to the
right (+) will engage the AutoStick mode putting the The transmission will not allow a downshift if the
transmission in the currently engaged gear. Moving the downshift would result in an engine overspeed condi-
shift lever to the Left (-) will engage the AutoStick mode tion. The transmission will always allow a upshift from
and downshift the transmission one gear. For example, if first to second gear, however 2nd - 3rd, 3rd - 4th, and 4th
the transmission is in Drive mode (a boxed ЉDЉ is – 5th upshifts will not be allowed if the vehicle speed is
displayed in the cluster) and is operating in third gear, too low to maintain operation in the selected gear. The
tapping the shift lever to the right (+) will engage transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle
AutoStick mode (while remaining in third gear) and a slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and will
boxed Љ3Љ will be displayed in the cluster. Tapping the display the current gear. After a stop, the driver should
shift lever to the left (-) would also engage AutoStick manually upshift (D+) the transmission as the vehicle is
mode, but would force a downshift to second gear, and accelerated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
When in the AutoStick mode, as the engine RPM nears Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to
the engine maximum speed, an “UPSHIFT” message will disengage AutoStick. The transmission will now oper-
appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center ate automatically; shifting between the five available
(EVIC) portion of your instrument cluster. This message gears.
appears in order to alert the driver that the engine speed
is approaching it’s maximum value and a upshift to the
General Information
next gear is required. In the event that the driver does not
upshift, the engine control system will automatically do it
for the driver. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
•
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
5
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. After starting, the driver should continue to
manually upshift (D+) as the vehicle is accelerated.
Shifting into or out of the AutoStick mode can be done
at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal. When the driver wishes to engage AutoStick,
simply move the shift lever to the left or right (D-/D+)
position while in DRIVE.
•
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en-
gaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The transmission will automatically shift up when NOTE:
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is
engaged.
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
WARNING!
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), or
other types of power steering fluids, when servicing
the power steering system of this vehicle. Damage to
the power steering system can result from the use of
the wrong power steering fluid.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
The power steering system requires the use of MOPAR service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or equivalent, checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
5
which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
NOTE:
WARNING!
•
When the parking brake is applied vehicle speed is
detected, the light will flash and a chime will sound to
alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
•
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
•
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
WARNING! (Continued)
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
•
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Significant over or under inflation of tires can lead to
loss of braking effectiveness.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed self-
test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot
lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may
feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
WARNING!
•
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
5
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed after-market radios or tele-
phones.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake
System is functioning.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
•
Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-
up, which could cause rear wheels to spin and
result in loss of vehicle control. Be especially
careful while driving on slippery roads, in close-
quarter maneuvering, parking or stopping.
Do not drive too fast for road conditions, espe-
cially when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of
water can build up between the tire tread and the
road. This hydroplaning action can cause loss of
traction, braking ability, and control.
After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
•
Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on
the pedal. This could overheat the brakes and
result in unpredictable braking action, longer
stopping distances, or brake damage.
•
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by down-
shifting the transmission or locking out overdrive
whenever possible.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and
Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve-
hicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine is released, the BAS is deactivated.
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
WARNING!
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“ESP Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)” in this section for more information.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
prevent accidents. The capabilities of
a
BAS-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING!
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter- Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
desired path.
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
•
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
The ESP system has two available operating modes.
turn ESP on again, momentarily press the ЉESP OFF”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of
operation.
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ЉESP
OFF” switch. When in “Partial OffЉ mode, the TCS
portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP
would normally allow is required to gain traction. To
5
ESP OFF Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “ESP Partial
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off” mode by pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. Once the reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “ESP Partial individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momen- swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the
tarily pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done “Partial Off” mode.
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
“Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
BAS Warning Light” and the “ESP/TCS Indi-
cator Light” in the instrument cluster both
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. They should both go out with the engine
running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
If the “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in either the ESP or
•
•
Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the ESP System will be ON even if it was
turned off previously.
the BAS system, or both. If this light remains on
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
after several ignition switch cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
5
•
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” will come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
Tire Markings
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ЉRЉ means radial construction
—ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
5
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
Tire Placard Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
5
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated. Vehicle
handling and braking may be reduced. You could
have an accident and be severely or fatally injured.
NOTE: The “run flat” feature eliminates the need for a
spare tire or jack. This vehicle is not equipped with either
a spare tire or jack.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Run Flat Tires
Tire Pressure
This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although the
tires are designed with a “run flat” feature that allows the
vehicle to be driven about 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph
(88 km/h), immediate service should be obtained.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Safety
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in over-heating and tire failure.
Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
5
•
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-
able steering response.
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire side wall.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look temperature changes.
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial-Ply Tires
5
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in Tread Wear Indicators
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
dealer for radial tire repairs.
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the with oil, grease and gasoline.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Replacement Tires
Life of Tire
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
factors including but not limited to:
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
•
•
•
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
5
WARNING!
All tires should be replaced after six years, regardless
of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning
can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Do not rotate the tires as the wider rear tires will not fit
on the front of the vehicle.
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
•
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
5
the proper pressure.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
one or more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left
Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three seconds, and a
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) flashing. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
•
•
•
Receiver Module
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units The system will automatically update, the graphic dis-
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
play of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPM System Message
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM” message for three seconds. This text message is
then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of
the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ЉCHECK TPM SYSTEMЉ
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.1L Engine
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, ates are required in some areas of the country during the
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci- Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
fications, if they are available.
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
5
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
E85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
•
•
•
•
•
operate in a lean mode
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
poor engine performance
poor cold start and cold driveability
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E85 perform the following:
•
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
change the engine oil and oil filter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
5
Fuel System Cautions
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)
•
•
Keep the liftgate/trunk closed when driving your
vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other
poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
after-market cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
5
•
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and will cause the MIL to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that cap is properly tight-
ened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
TRAILER TOWING
Common Towing Definitions
In this section you will find safety tips and information The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do you in understanding the following information:
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
safely as possible.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not tow when the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” is illuminated. Failure to follow
this could result in loss of control and serious
injury.
The tailpipes may be hot and you could be seri-
ously injured if you come into contact with the
tailpipes.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
5
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its Љloaded and
ready for operationЉ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Weight-Carrying Hitch
rear GAWR. A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
•
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi-
tional information.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
Class II - Medium
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
6.1L Automatic
8,800 lbs (3 992 kg)
35 sq ft (3.25 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
308 lbs (140 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
5
information.
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on Consider the following items when computing the
your trailer hitch.
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
•
•
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Towing Requirements
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
CAUTION!
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
5
•
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
3. GAWR
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always, block or ؆chock؆ the trailer
wheels.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
−
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
−
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
CAUTION!
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the AutoStick feature (D-) to select a lower gear range.
•
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
−
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until MOTORHOME, ETC.)
you can get back to cruising speed.
Recreational towing is not allowed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
5
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Ⅵ If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Ⅵ Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Ⅵ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 308
▫ Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Ⅵ Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Ⅵ Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission
to NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may run down your battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
6
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although the
tires are designed with a “run flat” feature that allows the
vehicle to be driven approximately 50 miles (80 km) at
55 mph (88 km/h). immediate service should be ob-
tained.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated. Vehicle
handling and braking may be reduced. You could
have an accident and be severely or fatally injured.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: The “run flat” feature eliminates the need for a
spare tire and jack. This vehicle is not equipped with
either a spare tire or jack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not
attempt jump-starting because the battery could rup-
ture or explode and cause personal injury. Battery
temperature must be brought above freezing point
before attempting a jump-start.
6
Positive Battery Post
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using a another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
•
•
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
the fuel injection system. from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
you should have the battery and charging system in- damage to the vehicle.
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious
injury.
•
•
Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case
and/or transmission.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Engine Compartment – 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Ⅵ Onboard Diagnostic System – OBD II . . . . . . . 314
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Ⅵ Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7
Ⅵ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Ⅵ Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Ⅵ Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . 350
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Ⅵ Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Ⅵ Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Ⅵ Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Ⅵ Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 356
Ⅵ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Ⅵ Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 6.1L
7
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Distribution Center
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Integrated Power Module
5 — Battery
7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9 — Engine Oil Fill
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Air Cleaner Filter
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM – OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “CHECK GASCAP” message
will be displayed in the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
gas cap until a ЉclickingЉ sound is heard. This is an EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
The message will remain displayed until the vehicle
diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test will
perform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle
was keyed off above 40°F (4°C) outside temperature and
the following vehicle start is above 40°F (4°C) outside
temperature. It may be possible to have a message that
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
outside temperatures. If the test is performed and the system is ready for testing.
problem is gone, the message will disappear.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MIL off. See your authorized dealer for service.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen: may then indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
running.
penalties being assessed against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
WARNING!
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
7
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
Engine Oil
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed
the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
CAUTION!
7
•
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5 (will be listed engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
on the back label of the oil container).
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
5W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
CAUTION!
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Engine Oil Viscosity
SAE 5W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating
temperatures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
WARNING!
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
7
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are
recommended.
a
high quality filter and are
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Air Conditioner Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. For best possible performance, your air conditioner
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main- should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
tenance required.
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
•
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
7
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When performing other underhood services, the hood Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
cleaned and lubricated.
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR performance of blades may be present with chattering,
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
lock cylinder.
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a Adding Washer Fluid
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tions of salt or road film.
tion Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “Washer Fluid Low” message will be displayed. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
CAUTION!
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
•
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
WARNING!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
CAUTION!
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
•
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
•
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below Ϫ34°F
(Ϫ37°C ) are anticipated.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
with your local authorities to determine the disposal gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it a month.
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
any ground spills immediately.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
Points to Remember
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
indicated on the bottle.
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install only
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result
in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mile-
age, and increased emissions.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
WARNING!
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or transmission slippage or
malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the
transmission fluid level.
7
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
CAUTION!
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating condi-
tions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the
transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has
the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
Washing
CAUTION!
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
•
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
Special Care
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains, and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
paint.
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
7
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do
not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well the wheels’ protective finish.
packaged and sealed.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
•
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider Equipped
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
•
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the Armor All. Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. clean vinyl upholstery.
For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Leather Seat Care & Cleaning
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove mended for leather upholstery.
soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
protectants on Stain Repel products.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
7
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva- solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean
lent, then MOPAR Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
FUSES
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Cavity
Description
Fuse
Interior Fuses
The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to
the left of the steering column.
1
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Audio Amp (B+)
2
3
4
5
Sunroof (B+)
Htd Mirror (EBL)
Rr Pwr Out (B+)
Rr HVAC (R/O)
(Commander Only)
6
7
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow
7
Door Locks (B+)
Pwr Outlet (B+)
8
9
Fuse Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cavity
Description
Cavity
Description
10
10 Amp
Red
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM),
Heater Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
(HVAC), Rear Heated
Seat Switch, O/H,
Heater Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
(HVAC) Relay, Rear
Park Assist
14
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Cigar Ltr (R/A)
15
16
Tire Pressure Tran-
sponders (R/O)
Upper & Lower
Switch Bank, Diag.
Connector, Cluster
(B+)
17
19
20
15 Amp
Blue
Spare
(R/S)
10 Amp
Red
Flipper Glass (B+)
11
12
Spare (B+)
10 Amp
Red
Door Mods, O/H
Lamps, IP Courtesy
Lamps, Glove Box
Lamp (B+)
Steering Column Con-
trol Module (SCCM),
Cluster (R/S), BUX
Trailer Tow
13
10 Amp
Red
Autowipe (R/A)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cavity
Description
21
Spare
(Acc De-
lay)
22
24
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
Rear Wiper (B+)
Power Distribution
Center (PDC) Relays,
Powertrain Control
Module, A580 (R/S)
25
10 Amp
Red
Shifter Assy (BTSI),
Trans. Case Switch,
ESP/ABS, Trailer
Sway Damp Relay
7
Power Distribution Center
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cavity
Description
1
50 Amp
Red
PTC Heater 1 (Diesel
Only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
Mini-
Fuse
Cartridge
Fuse
—
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Mini-
Fuse
Cavity
Description
Cavity
Description
Spare
2
HID Headlamps
10
11
HVAC Blower
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PTC Heater 2 (Diesel
Only)
Power Outlets
12
13
Rear Wiper, Ign R/O
40 Amp
Green
Rear Window De-
froster (EBL)/Heated
Mirror
Rear HVAC – If
Equipped
Spare
ASD
PTC Heater 3 (Diesel
Only)
Cig Lighter, Trail Tow
Batt
Power Liftgate (Com-
mander Only)
Starter, JB Power
14
30 Amp
Pink
—
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
15
16
17
ABS Pump
20 Amp
Blue
Front Power Win-
dows
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Cavity
Description
Cavity
Description
Fuse
18
40 Amp
Green
Accessory Delay,
Seats
26
15 Amp
Blue
Brake Lamps
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
JB Power
27
20 Amp
Yellow
HD Washer – If
Equipped (Export
Only)
Wiper Motor
Fuel Pump
28
29
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
15 Amp
Blue
ABS Valves
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
PCM Batt (Gasoline
Only)
Spare
Spare
Powertrain Control
Module (Diesel Only)
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
E-Diff
TCM, A/C Clutch
Power Inverter
Rear Heated Seats
30
31
32
7
33
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
Cavity
Description
Spare
Trail-Tow Mod (Ex-
port Only)
Cavity
Description
34
35
—
43
Coils, Actuators
20 Amp
Yellow
44
—
Spare
36
37
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Spare
Ignition Switch
Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
38
39
40
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
HID Left
HID Right
Next Generation Con-
troller (NGC), Injec-
tors
41
42
20 Amp
Yellow
—
Subwoofer (SRT
Only)
Spare
Integrated Power Module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Cavity
Description
Cavity
Description
Fuse
8
10 Amp
Red
Lt Park Lamps
17
20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Fog Lamps (Ex-
port Only)
9
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer-Tow Park
Lamps
Rt Park Lamps
18
19
20
21
22
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #1
Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #3
Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
10
12
13
14
15
16
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #4
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #2
Adjustable Pedal
Ft Fog Lamps
Horn
30 Amp
Pink
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
MOD
7
23
50 Amp
Red
Radiator Fan
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
Cavity
Description
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
27
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #1 — Intrusion
Module, Satellite
Video, Steering Con-
trol Module
•
Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Module
labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
•
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
28
29
30
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2 — Radio
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) R/S
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
R/O
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Headlamps (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Headlamps (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
7
Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlamps (Low Beam) – High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-
ishes and becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
1 — High Beam Bulb
2 — Low Beam Bulb
3 — Turn Signal Bulb
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
1 — High Beam Bulb
2 — Low Beam Bulb
3 — Turn Signal Bulb
7
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamp
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle. 1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Turn the front fog lamp bulb one–quarter turn coun- 2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.
terclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the
housing.
1 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Tail/Turn Signal Bulb
3 — Back-Up Lamp Bulb
7
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL
housing.
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
21 Gallons
79 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-40, API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
14 Liters
14.8 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat-
ing conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725
and are approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of a full synthetic 5W–40 or equivalent engine oil.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
PLZTR5A – 13 (Gap 0.040 in [1.01 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4 product.
Transfer Case
MOPAR NV146 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent. Usage of other fluid/
lubricants is NOT recommended.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent.
MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only rec-
ommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steer-
ing Fluid or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-
10838.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 360
Ⅵ Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 362
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
N
T
E
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
N
A
N
C
E
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S
C
H
E
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
driving.
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
D
U
L
NOTE:
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361
•
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
N
T
E
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
N
A
N
C
E
Once a Month
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
•
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
S
C
H
E
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
D
U
L
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and add as
needed.
E
S
At Each Stop for Fuel
8
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Oil Change
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
N
T
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
E
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
N
A
N
C
E
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
N
T
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
E
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
N
A
N
C
E
filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. †
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
370 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏
Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
not done at 60 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 371
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
372 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 373
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Odometer Reading
Date
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 375
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
WARNING!
•
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Ⅵ Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Ⅵ Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 382
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Ⅵ MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Ⅵ If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Ⅵ Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 380
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 380
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
9
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Ⅵ Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Ⅵ Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 379
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 992-1997
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
ter should include the following information: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Phone: (800) 465–2001
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Authorized dealership name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 381
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter line at 1-800-521-9922.
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle those documents.
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
MOPARா PARTS
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 383
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
individual problems between you, your authorized defect to the Canadian government should write to:
dealer, and the manufacturer.
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
•
Service Manuals
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
•
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
•
www.techauthority.com
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
requirements in addition to these grades.
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
388 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,252 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329,355
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 330
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,255
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 17
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,54 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,53,58,73,159 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 225
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,335
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,54
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 48,51,54 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 137
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,159 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 389
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 22 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,72 Caps, Filler
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,286
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,255 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 70 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,225
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
390 INDEX
Check Engine Light
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 331
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,66,68
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,187,190,199
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,332
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 329,355
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Connector
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 210 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 391
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,230
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Dipsticks Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . 116
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 165
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Disposal
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,166
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Emergency, In Case of
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 315,360
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 137 Engine
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392 INDEX
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,286,326
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,325
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,286 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Filters
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,355
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,355
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,355 Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,157,351,352
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 55 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 393
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,355
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 356 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,165,352
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,288,314
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Gauges
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
394 INDEX
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Hitches
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,23,282
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 128
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,349 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,156
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,90 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 106 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 395
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,100
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,53,58,73,159
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,260
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
396 INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,106
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,163,260
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 165
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,165,352
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 158
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,127
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 158
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,260
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,100,106,351,352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 397
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 158,315
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Loading Vehicle
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,382
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
398 INDEX
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314,315
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,51,55 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,51,54 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,302
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,383
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,355 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 399
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Programming Transmitters
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 268
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Power
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 331
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Radio, Satellite (Uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 137 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,86 Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249 Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Pretensioners
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
400 INDEX
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Run Flat Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Remote Control
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 223 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Satellite Radio (Uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,72
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 41
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,68
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 401
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Service Engine Soon Light
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,187,190,199
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,90 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,86
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,106,157,351,352
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,159 Sound System
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402 INDEX
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,238 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 45
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Steering
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248,249 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 225
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 162
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 268
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,348 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 403
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,272,385 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,309
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,269 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 299
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,335
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404 INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
(HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Transmitter Programming Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,348
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,157,351,352 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,346 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109,324
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 210 Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 405
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,230 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
